Owners manual

ManualsBrandsLG Electronics ManualsCell PhoneKE800

Some of contents in this manual may differ

from your phone depending on the software of

the phone or your service provider.

KE800

ENGLISH

KE800

P/N : MMBB0226118

(

1.0

)

KE800

ENGLISH

Summary of content (180 pages)

PAGE 1
KE800 ENGLISH P/N : MMBB0226118(1.0) KE800 ENGLISH KE800 Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.
PAGE 2
‫‪ KE800‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ‪6‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KE 800‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫‪59‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫
PAGE 5
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪ KE800‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫◄ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 7
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ)‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺃﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﺘﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ! ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﻄﺮﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻓﻨﻴﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 10
‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺠﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻮﺵ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ :‬ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫◄ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ :‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 13
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ(‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ – ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪.
PAGE 14
‫◄ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ p‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ :‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ :‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SMS‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺘﺔ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫• ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪MicroSD‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫◄ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺔﻤﺋﺎﻘﻟﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪. GPRS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪. WAP‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.
PAGE 18
‫◄‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ »ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ« ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﺪﻱ ﻭﺟﻔﺎﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ﺃﺯﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺔﻤﺋﺎﻘﻟﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 19
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ«(‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍء ﻗﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺃﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻄﺎء‪.
PAGE 20
‫◄ ﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪. SIM‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ، SIM‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴّﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ( ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 23
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺄﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .
PAGE 24
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.73‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺒﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ) ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪. LCD‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 28
‫◄ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇ ﺫﺍ ﻇﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺛﻖ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) 123‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪.‬؟‪!،:‬؛“@‪1‬‬ ‫ﺏﺕﺓﺙ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺃﺇﺁﻯﺅﺉء‪3‬‬ ‫ﺱﺵﺹﺽ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺩﺫﺭﺯ‪5‬‬ ‫ﺝﺡﺥ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻥﻩﻭﻱ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻑﻕﻙﻝﻡ‪8‬‬ ‫ﻁﻅﻉﻍ‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪0 ،‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ”‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]ﻛﺘﻢ[‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻢ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫‪ 1.1‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1.3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1.4‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ 2.1‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2.3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫‪ 2.4‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 3.1‬ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪ 3.3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪ 3.4‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫‪ 4.1‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 4.3‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4.4‬ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 5.3‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 5.4‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1.2‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 2.2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 3.2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 4.2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ 6.
PAGE 36
‫‪ 1.6‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 1.7‬ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 1.9‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2.6‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ 2.7‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2.9‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3.6‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 3.7‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ 3.9‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4.6‬ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪ 4.7‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪ 4.9‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5.6‬ﺍﻻﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 5.7‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺱ‬ ‫‪ 5.9‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 6.6‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ 1.8‬ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫‪ 2.8‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 3.8‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 4.8‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 6.9‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 7.9‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 8.
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫)ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎً‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪. WAP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﺰﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2. 1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ” ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫“ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.4. 1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ WAP‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ) ‪ ( URL‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 40
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 4.4. 1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪WAP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 5.4.
PAGE 41
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ) ‪( CLI‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻢ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﻳُﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺪﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 44
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺔ ﺳﻮﺍء‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪%,×,-,+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ +/-‬ﻭ ‪ sin‬ﻭ ‪cos‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ tan‬ﻭ ‪ log‬ﻭ ‪ in‬ﻭ ‪ exp‬ﻭ ‪ sqrt‬ﻭ ‪ deg‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪.rad‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺑﺪء[ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ]ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺗﻮﻗﻒ[ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 46
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫)ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.4‬‬ ‫‪1.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ “ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ”‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ )‪10‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ٍ 3‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ٍ 5‬‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪،(1200×1600‬‬ ‫ﻭ)‪ ،(960×1280‬ﻭ)‪،(480×640‬‬ ‫ﻭ)‪.(240×320‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻖ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.4‬‬ ‫‪3.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴّﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ KE800‬ﺑﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻀﻤّﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺎً‪،‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫◄ ‪ : M4A ، MP4‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺍ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ KE800‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻭ ‪ . AAC‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪VBR‬‬ ‫‪ MP3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫‪.MP3‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫◄ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ “ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ”‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻏﻴّﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎ ﻭﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺧﺼﺔ ﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ .
PAGE 52
‫‪ .2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ “ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ” ﺃﻭ “ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ” ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫“ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ”‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ )ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻓﺮﺍﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ” ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ “ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ”‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]ﺗﻮﻗﻒ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪) SMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ( ﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫) ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ( ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.1.5‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ]ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪ .
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ : T9‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ T9‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ T9‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ T9‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ “ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ” ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 56
‫◄ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺁﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ :T9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ . T9‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.T9‬‬ ‫◄ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ T9‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ T9‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ :T9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ .
PAGE 58
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ “ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ”‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ “ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ ،” SIM‬ﻳﺠﺐ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.5‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺠﻠﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺟﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﺎُ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺎً ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺎً ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺴﻠﻢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 2.8.
PAGE 62
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ :T9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ . T9‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪SMS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ GSM‬ﻣﻔﻀﻞ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ GPRS‬ﻣﻔﻀﻞ‪ GSM /‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ GPRS /‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 2.0.5‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 5‬ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫“ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ”‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬‫ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻩ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻟﻘﺐ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪POP3‬‬‫ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 4.0.5‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.6‬‬ ‫‪1.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ 3GP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ 3gp‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ،MPEG4‬ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪ h.263‬ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪.AMR‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ” ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ “ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ”‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2.6‬‬ ‫‪2.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPG‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ JPG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ “ﻋﺮﺽ”‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ “ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ”‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 300‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 68
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .
PAGE 69
‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ “ﺃﺧﺮﻯ” ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪USB‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ “ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ”‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻊ‬ ‫◄ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ KE800‬ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺫﻱ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ ، USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ MP3‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ “ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ” ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ‪“ :‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ”‪ ،‬ﻭ “ﺻﺎﻣﺖ”‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫“ﻋﺎﻡ”‪ ،‬ﻭ “ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻝ” ﻭ “ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ”‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ “ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ” ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(X1.X.7‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 72
‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1.8‬‬ ‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺑﺤﺚ” ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫]ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء[‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺣﻔﻆ[‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺏ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﻩ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪،‬ﻭ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3.8‬‬ ‫‪3.
PAGE 74
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5.8‬‬ ‫‪5.‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪( SIM‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪. SIM‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 75
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪,‬‬‫ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﺴﺦ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪ /‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 76
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(1.1.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(2.1.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ‪YYYY/MM/‬‬ ‫‪ ،DD‬ﻭ‪ ،DD/MM/YYYY‬ﻭ‪MM/DD/YYYY‬‬ ‫)ﺣﻴﺚ ‪ :D‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ‪ :M /‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ‪ :Y /‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(3.1.9‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(4.1.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(5.3.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(6.3.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ :LCD‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪%100‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ %80‬ﻭ‪ %60‬ﻭ‪%40‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(7.3.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(8.3.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4.
PAGE 78
‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺑـ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺃﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ )ﻣﻜﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ( ﻟـ ‪ :DUN‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪ WidComm‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟـ‬ ‫‪ Windows 1.4‬ﻭ‪3.
PAGE 79
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬‫ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 3.5.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ GPRS‬ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺁﻟﻴًﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ GPRS‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ‪ WAP‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ GPRS‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤًﺎ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ؛‬ ‫‪ 9600‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ) 14400‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ(‬ ‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ :GPRS‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ GPRS‬ﻛﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ‬ ‫‪.‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ّ :‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ :IP‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺸﻐﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻼ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 3.7. 9‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ(‬ ‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻠﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 4.7. 9‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ) ﺗﻠﻘﻲ (‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪( 1.8. 9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﺍً‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪. PUK‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 85
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN2‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN2‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪9.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪0.9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺳﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﻮﻧﻚ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪KE800 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎ ﻡ ‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ C°55+ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ‪ C°10- :‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪87‬‬
PAGE 89
PAGE 90
‫‪ KE800‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
PAGE 91
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪10 KE 800‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﭘﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼ ﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪28‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ
PAGE 92
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫‪59‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮﻭ
PAGE 93
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ‪ KE800‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﺸﻜﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎٌ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 94
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ )‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ KE800‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 96
‫◄ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫◄ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﭙﺮﻫﻴﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪﺍی ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﯽﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻝﺟﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝﻫﺎی ﻓﻠﺰی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ )‪ (LCD‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ :‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫◄ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 100
‫‪ .5‬ﻓﻴﺶ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫◄ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ )ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ(‬ ‫◄ ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫◄ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ‪ -‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ :‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﻃﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫◄ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KE 800‬‬ ‫‪ o‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ p‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫◄ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﮔﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﭘﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮی‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪MicroSD‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎ ﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪13‬‬
PAGE 103
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪* .‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ GPRS‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻛﻠﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎ ﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫◄‬ ‫◄‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ »ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‹‹ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ‬‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻟﻤﺴﻰ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 106
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻰ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ(‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻰ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻰ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪).
PAGE 107
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SIM‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ‪ SIM‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻃﻼﻳﻰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺨﺴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻓﻴﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﮐﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ً‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 109
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬ ‫◄ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻮﺍﻇﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﻮﻙ ﺗﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍی ‪ ٬‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻗﻢ ﭘﺎک‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 30‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻨﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻭ‬ ‫)ﻧﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭی ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪ ٬‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٬‬ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ٬‬ﺳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ‪ LCD‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﻩ ﺍی ‪ T9‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 114
‫◄ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ABC‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﻑ ﺩﻭﻡ‬ ‫◄ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪١٢٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻯ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﻻﻯ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻬﻴﺎ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫)ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ( ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍ ی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎی ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ]ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ[‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ]ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ[‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی »ﺩﺭﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ« ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 120
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1.1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1.3‬ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ 1.4‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 2.1‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 2.3‬ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2.4‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫‪ 3.1‬ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪URL‬‬ ‫‪ 3.3‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪ MP3 3.4‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ 4.1‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 4.3‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ 4.4‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ 1.2‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 2.2‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬ ‫‪ 3.2‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ 4.2‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪ 5.3‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫‪ 6.3‬ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ 7.3‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ 8.
PAGE 122
‫‪ 1.6‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1.7‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪ 1.9‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2.6‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ 2.7‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻳﺒﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪ 2.9‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬ ‫‪ 3.6‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 3.7‬ﺳﺎﮐﺖ‬ ‫‪ 3.9‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫‪ 4.6‬ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪ 4.7‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ 4.9‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ 5.6‬ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 5.7‬ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 5.9‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ 6.6‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ 1.8‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫‪ 2.8‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 3.8‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ 4.8‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 6.9‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ 7.9‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ 8.
PAGE 123
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﻬﺎی ‪WAP‬‬ ‫) ﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ ( ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻧﮑﺪﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﺍﺷﻨﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 124
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪2 .1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ URL‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺏ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 125
‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 1. 4. 1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫‪ WAP‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ) ‪ ( URL‬ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﻛﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 6. 4. 7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 4. 4. 1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪WAP‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 5. 4.
PAGE 127
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫)‪ (CLI‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺍﺑﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ( ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪1 .2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪3 .
PAGE 128
‫◄ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪5 .2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪1 .3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪2 .3‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 130
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 2. 3. 3‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻴﻼﺩی‪ ،‬ﻗﻤﺮی ﻭ ﺷﻤﺴﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪4 .3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ ٤‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺟﻤﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‪ ،-/+ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺱ )‪،(sin‬‬ ‫ﻛﺴﻴﻨﻮﺱ‬ ‫)‪ ، ( tan ) ،( cos‬ﻟﮕﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ )‪sqrt، eXp، in،( log‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 131
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪6 .3‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪] ،‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ]ﺩﻭﺭ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ‪] ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ[ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‪] ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ[‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪7 .3‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺭﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻛﻔﺶ ﻭ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 132
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪..‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪1 .4‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 133
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻋﺎﻟﯽ‪/‬ﻋﺎﻟﯽ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ )‪10‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 5 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ 3 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 134
‫‪ MP3‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪3 .4‬‬ ‫‪ KE800‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺳﺮﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎی ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺑﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 135
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫)ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ‪ 8‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﺎ ‪48‬‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫◄ ‪ : MP4‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ‪٨‬‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴٨‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﺥ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺗﺎ ‪٣٢٠‬‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻠﻮﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫◄ ‪ KE800‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ MP3‬ﻭ ‪ ACC‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪VBR MP3‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ‪ ACC‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ Mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪ MP3‬ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﯽ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 137
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ :‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻠﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﮐﭙﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﺁﻓﺮﻳﻨﯽ ﻳﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 138
‫‪ .2‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﺵ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﮑﯽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 139
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ]ﺗﻮﻗﻒ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪1 .5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎی ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ‪) SMS‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ(‪) MMS ،‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی(‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺻﻨﺪﻭ ﻕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﺩ ﺭﺝ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 1. 1. 5‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﺪ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﻀﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ‪ T9: T9‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ‪ T9‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ‪ T9‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ‪) Exit‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ( ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺸﺪ‪.
PAGE 142
‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﺪﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫◄ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫◄ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 144
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪3 .5‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 146
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ‪ MMS‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪MMS‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍی ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﻔﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 1. 8. 5‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 148
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺭﺝ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 149
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 2. 0. 5‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ‪ :‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺴﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪ :‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ POP3‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬‫ﭘﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ :‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﺧﻮﺩ‬‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‪ :‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ SMTP‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬‫ﭘﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 151
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 4. 0. 5‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﻜﺮﺑﻨﺪﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 5. 0. 5‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 6. 0.
PAGE 152
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪1 .6‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ GP3‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ 3gp‬ﮐﺪک ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺑﺎ‬ ‫‪ MPEG4، h.263‬ﻭ ﮐﺪک ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪ AMR‬ﮐﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪) OK‬ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ( ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭼﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪JPG‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 154
‫◄ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‪/‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‪/‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 200‬ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨﺎً‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪4 .
PAGE 155
‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪5 .6‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻭﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪6 .6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫◄ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ »ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ« ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ »ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ« ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺪﻭﺵ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 157
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻨﺞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻳﺒﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﮐﺖ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪(1.x.7‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 158
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪1 .8‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪) Search‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫]ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ[ ﻳﺎ ]ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﻛﭙﯽ ﻳﻚ‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 159
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫]ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪.b‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ,‬ﻡ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪ .c‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪ .d‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .e‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪3 .8‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻀﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻔﺖ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 160
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪5 .8‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ(‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪6 .8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫]ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪7 .
PAGE 161
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻰ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫]ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ[ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ‪/‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 162
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪1 .9‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﺮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 1. 1. 9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 2. 1. 9‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪,DD/MM/YYYY‬‬ ‫‪ MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ D: ) .‬ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ :M /‬ﻣﺎﻩ ‪ : Y /‬ﺳﺎﻝ (‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 3. 1. 9‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ( ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 4. 1.
PAGE 163
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 3. 3. 9‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺷﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺳﺒﮏ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺪﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺵ ﺁﻣﺪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 4. 3. 9‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 6. 3. 9‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪%60, %40‬‬ ‫‪ %100, %80,‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 7. 3. 9‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 164
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻐﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻔﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‪/‬ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪KE800‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﭙﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﭙﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪.(mp3, mp4, aac) MP3 :‬‬‫ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )‪.(3GP‬‬‫ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ :‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ )‪.
PAGE 165
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻔﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 166
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 2. 5. 9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ LG KE800‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 167
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫‪ GPRS‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ WAP‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭﻟﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 168
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 5. 5. 9‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪62‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ‪ APN‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 169
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻓﺎﮐﺲ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻓﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪.
PAGE 170
‫ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 4. 7. 9‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ(‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﻮ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ )ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ(‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﻕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 5. 7. 9‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 171
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪ PUK‬ﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ PUK .5‬ﻛﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ‪ 10‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 2. 8. 9‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ 0000‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 172
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ ‪( 5. 8. 9‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ(‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.
PAGE 173
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩی ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗﯽ )ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﯽ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪-‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ Answer‬ﻭ ‪End‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ‪ Hold‬ﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 174
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ‪KE800 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪C°55+ :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻗﻞ ‪C°10- :‬‬ ‫‪85‬‬
PAGE 175
PAGE 176
PAGE 177
PAGE 178
HOW TO USE QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE Cut out Quick Reference Guide bound to this manual along the cutout line and fold as illustrated below. How to cut How to fold Cut out Quick Reference Guide along the cutout line. You can place a scale on the cutoff line and cut as illustrated below. • Be careful not to cut yourself when using scissors. Fold Quick Reference Guide along the perforated line so that the cover faces upwards as illustrated below.
PAGE 179
Part of the phone KE800 QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE WELCOME AND THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING LG MOBILE PHONE 1. Earpiece 2. Main LCD 3. Alpha numeric keys 4. Side keys 5. Headset and charger jack 6. End key 7. Side camera key 8. MP3 key 1 5 2 6 7 8 4 3 For more details, please refer to the User Guide. Using the Camera 1. Select Camera. If you want to access this menu directly, press and hold momentarily. 2. Focus on the subject to capture the image, and then press the key. 3.
PAGE 180
Using the MP3 player 1. Press MP3 menu, and then select MP3 player. The KE800 features an integrated MP3 player. You can enjoy listening to MP3 music files on your phone using a compatible headset or via the internal loudspeaker. Note ] Because of the small dimension of the speaker, in some cases the audio could be distorted, especially at maximum volume and when there are lots of bass sounds. Therefore, we recommend you to use the stereo headset in order to appreciate the high quality of your music.